Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files.Introduction In this tutorial. 1 . You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. Finally. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project.

2 .

You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. fixtures. electrical panels. such as mechanical equipment. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. and plumbing fixtures. such as duct. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Germany. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. Add basic MEP elements. Add more detailed modelling elements.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. and piping. electrical. and plumbing engineering workflows. 3 . How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials.

4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . After completing each exercise. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. For example. you learn where the training files are located. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. such as templates and families. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. when you add ductwork. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. So. and tags. For example. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. and sheets to document the project. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. you can choose to save your work. However. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. In this exercise. Metric file names have an _m suffix. views. as well as how to open and save them. to provide a richer and more finished design. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. however. Create schedules. is located and accessed in the training files location. When you install the training files as instructed. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. templates. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. your Training folder may be in a different location. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. You do not design entire systems. NOTE Depending on your installation. On the Contents tab. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. Create detail views. When you open a training file. annotations. Contact your CAD manager for more information.

You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. verify that Project Files (*. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. click ➤ Save As. Accessing Training Files | 5 . and you can open any supported file type. enter the new file name. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. double-click Imperial or Metric. You may close the file with or without saving changes.rvt) is selected. and click the Training Files icon. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click the training file name. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. if you open settings. depending on the instructions in the tutorial.rvt and make changes. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. scroll down. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type.rvt. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. and click Save. select the folder in which to save the new file. a list of file types displays. 8 If you have made changes. 3 In the right pane. and click Open. For Files of type. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. For File name. the Open dialog displays. you are prompted to save the changes. For example.

6 .

You learn the terminology. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In this case. the floor or roof remains connected. the door retains this relationship to the partition. and schedules required for a building project. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. drawings. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. In the Revit MEP model. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. If you move the partition. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. the operation of the software is parametric. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. drawing sheets. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. sections. In this case. and plans. the hierarchy of elements. schedules. hence. scope. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. ■ ■ 7 . and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. the parameter is one of association or connection. every drawing sheet. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. If the length of the elevation is changed. 2D and 3D view. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. As you work in drawing and schedule views. and phases when you need it. quantities.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. and keynotes are annotation elements. sinks. For example. boilers. boilers. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. and electrical panels. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. and reference planes are datum elements. grids. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. and 2D detail components. sprinklers. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. tags. sinks. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. They display in relevant views of the design. dimensions. For example. filled regions. walls and ceilings are hosts. ducts. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. For example. When you change something. and electrical panels. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. For example. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. Datum elements help to define project context. dimensions. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Examples include detail lines. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. tags. For example. They help to describe or document the design. For example. ducts.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. sprinklers. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . levels.

the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. In other cases. such as roofs. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. you can explicitly control them. first floor. you do nothing to establish these relationships. In Revit MEP. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. Often. families.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. However. and types. section views. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. and so forth). you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. elevation views. To place levels. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . top of wall. The project file contains all information for the building design. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. for example. If you can draw. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. North . schedules. floors. programming is not required. By using a single project file. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. you must be in a section or elevation view. and ceilings. Project: In Revit MEP. and drawings of the design. from geometry to construction data. or bottom of foundation. For example. This information includes components used to design the model. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. Most often. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. views of the project. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project.

For example. Then experiment with them. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . A type can also be a style. pipes. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). or layer the views to see only the one on top. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. showing. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. However. identical use. such as a 30” X 42” title block. and wires. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. Type: Each family can have several types. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. hiding. With a few clicks. System families include ducts. For example. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. For example. You can also display several project views at one time.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. System families can be transferred between projects. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. and similar graphical representation. each in-place family contains only a single type. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. Unlike system and standard component families. A type can be a specific size of a family. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project.

Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. To return the panel to the ribbon. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop.

and for switching views. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. data and systems. architect-specific tools. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. then select what you want to modify. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. and CAD files. tools used for running analysis on the current design. When working on the Modify tab.. tools used for editing existing elements. tools used for adding 2D information to a design.. select the tool first. and settings. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. project and system parameters.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed.

The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. By default. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. provides access to common tools. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. when adding duct. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. To keep a panel expanded. For example. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. provides requested information. displays frequently used tools. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. closes the application menu (double-click). click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel.

. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to.. (Open) save the current drawing. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. click. select a template and create a new drawing.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands... (Export) On the application menu. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. such as Export and Publish. select a file to open. (Save As) export the current drawing. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name.

(Print) access product and license information. Camera. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. to. provides views including Default 3D. (Publish) print the current drawing. (Licensing) close the file. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project.. annotation.On the application menu. family. or template file. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. saves a current project. but is not enabled by default. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. click.. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. publish the current project. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down.. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . and Walkthrough. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. family. To enable or disable a tool item. or template file.. annotation.

these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. Clear the Status Bar check mark. repeat the command. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. This displays the command history in a list. To hide the Status Bar. or the Family Editor. displaying the same information. Starting with the most recent command. workshared components. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. When you are using a command.To undo or redo a series of operations. To show the Status Bar again. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. Modify. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. when you switch to another editing mode. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. When you are highlighting an element or component. check the Status Bar. In addition. However. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. Group. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. Clipboard.

Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. Place a Wall. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. When you place an element in a drawing. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. On the Quick Access toolbar. To change existing elements to a different type. for example. select one or more elements of the same category. click (Modify). do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar.To cancel or exit the current command.

After you are familiar with these tasks.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. For example.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. click Training Files. Zoom the view In the tutorials. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view.rvt. 1 Click ➤ Open. In the following steps. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. There are several ways to access zoom options. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .

In the drawing area. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. 9 To display SteeringWheels. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. If you do not have a wheel mouse. on the Navigation bar.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. the view zooms in on the selected area. click . To modify or add snap increments. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. 6 Click in the drawing area. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. Modifying the View | 19 . The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. When you release the mouse button. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. this is referred to as a crossing selection. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). NOTE As you zoom in and out.

20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . and click tin the Options dialog. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. 14 To exit the wheel. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. moving the wheel to the desired location. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. click the SteeringWheels tab. ➤ Options. As you move the mouse. To define settings for SteeringWheels. Click and drag to orbit the design. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. press ESC. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. and then using the Zoom tool again. For more information about SteeringWheels.

and select the duct. as shown. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan . it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. bottoms. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. Similar controls. These are the drag controls. called drag controls. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . referred to as shape handles. Small blue dots.Design. and open Level 2 . you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. display along the ends.Design ➤ Floor Plans. After you are familiar with these tasks. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Performing Common Tasks | 21 .17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. 2 Enter ZR. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct.

Move. 6 On the Undo menu. select the first item in the list. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. In this example. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. click the Undo command. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. on the Standard toolbar. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct.3 Click and drag the bottom control. All changes you make to a project are tracked. or press CTRL+Z. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar.

8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. click to specify the starting position. and drag it to the left as shown. The duct is moved to the new position. as shown. In this case. 11 With the duct already selected. and click again to specify the ending position. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. you want to move the duct. require 2 clicks to complete the command. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . for example. Some commands. such as Move and Copy. After selecting the element to move. 10 Move the cursor to the right.

13 To end a command.Return. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . such as the Modify Ducts command. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways.Supply. Select Mechanical . stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. 14 Enter VG. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command.End a command Some commands. For example. Click OK. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. Press ESC twice. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed.

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

you learn how to start a project from a template. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. system families. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. You can choose from several templates. and click Open. 27 . Finally. and loadable families. link files. click Browse. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. In that case. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. such as coordination review and interference checking. 2 In the New Project dialog. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. such as ducts and pipes. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. create and manage views. the default building levels and standard views. and geometry from the starting template. under Template file. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. such as the default project units and settings.rte template. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. settings. and open Imperial ➤ Templates.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. You can either select a template from the template library. New projects inherit all the families. under Create new. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. 5 In the New Project dialog. select Project. click Training files. 6 Click OK. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. and modify system settings. use copy/monitor.

review the construction materials listed. For Location. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). ■ ■ For Ground Plane. If you want to use a template other than the default. (Browse). select Project template. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. create another new project using the Construction template. click Edit. ■ ■ Under Create new. click Browse. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. ■ For Building Construction. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. select School or University. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . you can select it now. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. In the Choose Template dialog. Click OK. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. for City. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. Click OK twice. 8 In the drawing area. 10 Using the same method. Click Cancel. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads.7 In the Project Browser. For example. NH. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. click (Browse). navigate to Imperial Templates. select Level 1. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. and open North. for Energy Data. select Manchester.rte template and click Open. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. When you select the material. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. under Energy Analysis. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog.

For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. select Views. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. 11 1/2". Creating an MEP Project | 29 . for 3/4".rfa and click Open. Click OK twice. 4 1/2". 4 1/2". 27 Click OK. 10 1/2". click Round. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 24 In the right pane. and 12 1/2". 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. For Categories. 25 In the left pane. under Duct Settings. 26 In the right pane. click Wiring. click Rectangular.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. 22 In the right pane. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. After standard settings have been established for an organization. and 5 1/2". power distribution systems. under Pipe Settings. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. for 3 1/2".19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. wiring. click Sizes. and fire protection systems. for 3 1/2". 23 In the left pane. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. 5 1/2". 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. Holding CTRL. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. piping. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. and demand factors for electrical systems. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. plumbing. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. under Duct Settings. 33 Click OK. select Identity Data.

In addition. click Training. From the Positioning list. 38 Close the file. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. and groups that are contained in a project. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane.Origin to Origin. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. under Template file. Select Ascending Click OK twice. select Auto . Notice that the file is saved as a template. select Sub-Discipline. under Create new.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. select View Name. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. For Sort by. To enable this coordination. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. Click Open. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i.rvt. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. You need to create the MEP model for the project. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . sheets. Linking Projects In this exercise. select Associated Level. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. 4 In the New Project dialog. For Then by. click Browse. 2 In the New Project dialog. select Project. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. For Then by. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. select Family and Type. families. 5 Click OK. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

click My Library. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. Save. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . ➤ Open. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. Load. 15 Under Library Name. click (Add Value).11 In the Places dialog. and click Open. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK twice. or families. and change the name to My Library. and click (Browse). 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. click the My Library icon. and select it as the library path. templates. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. and Import dialogs.

19 Click Cancel. 3 Under Settings. and decal image files. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. If you want to relocate this path. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. 23 Click 24 Click OK. such as bump maps. 22 Select My Library. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 27 Click OK. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click OK. specify the new location here. 11 In the Options dialog. 9 In the text editor. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. click the Spelling tab. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 12 Create a new project using the default template. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. enter sheetmtl-Cu. (Remove Value) to delete the library. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. view the current path. click Edit. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 14 Click in the drawing area. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. click Edit. 20 Click ➤ Options. click Places. custom color files. 21 On the File Locations tab. This path is determined during installation. If you work in a large office. 5 In the text editor. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. select Ignore words in uppercase. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. 2 In the Options dialog. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary.

40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. click OK.. under Dimension Snaps. click Edit. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. As you zoom in and out within a view. 6 In the Snaps dialog. click File menu ➤ Save. 25 Close the file without saving it. delete sheetmtl-CU. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . click Training Files. work with snapping turned off. and enter 1 .17 In the Spelling dialog. 23 In the text editor. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. 24 In the Options dialog. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. you modify snap increments. 22 In the text editor. In this exercise. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 21 Under Personal dictionary. click Close. click OK. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method.rte. 20 Under Settings. you modify snap settings. 4 In the New Project dialog. under Template file. 2 In the New Project dialog. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 18 Click ➤ Options. 19 In the Options dialog. click Restore Defaults. click Browse. You can turn snap settings on and off. click the Spelling tab.

Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. deselect Chain. If it does not. click OK. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. For example. 8 In the Snaps dialog. and move the cursor to the right. TIP To zoom while sketching. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. zoom out until it does so. 10 On the Options Bar. enter SM. snapping reverts to the system default settings. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. While sketching. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. If you do not have a wheel button. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. This is the increment that you added previously. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. use the wheel button on your mouse.7 Under Object Snaps. such as ZO to zoom out. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action.

click in the Length dimension snap increments box. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. it will snap to the endpoints. If you move the cursor along the wall. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 22 Move the cursor downward. Notice that snapping is once again active.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. and delete the value 1’ . 24 Under Dimension Snaps. with or without saving it. 25 Click OK. and the wall edges. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 26 Close the file. and specify the wall endpoint. Do not set the wall end point. and move the cursor to the right. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall.. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. the midpoint. 19 Enter SM. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. 43 .Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.

44 .

and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. After finishing each exercise. At the end of the tutorial. methodology. However. go to http://www. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you can choose to save your work. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. As you create the mechanical system. In this exercise. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. water source heat pump (WSHP). The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. In this lesson. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. 45 . After applying a color scheme to the zones. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. you design a mechanical system for an office building. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. duct system and a hydronic piping system. This system consists of a cooling tower. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you will understand the process. and then you create a plenum level.autodesk. If the tutorial training files are not present. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. you first configure the linked architectural model. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. By following the recommended workflow. you first plan the system.

not in the MEP training file. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add a level for plenums. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. click to select it. select Room Bounding.rvt. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. These components are defined in the architectural training file. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Space Plan is highlighted. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. Next. roof. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. ceilings. and click OK. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. under Constraints. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. and after the linked model highlights. In this section. NOTE When working with a linked file.

offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line.6 In the Project Browser. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. and double-click West . 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). 16 Press Esc. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . The new level is placed. Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. and in the Plan View Types dialog. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). Click Plan View Types. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. verify that only Floor Plan is selected.MEP. enter 8'. and click OK. Preparing Spaces | 47 . For Offset. 9 On the Draw panel. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. and enter Level 2 Plenum. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template).

you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. select MEP . for Top. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. For Cut plane. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Notice that the site plan displays in the view. and click Apply Default View Template. select Design. However.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. and for Offset. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. Under View Depth. 20 In the Project Browser. Under Identity Data. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . you can choose to save your work. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. For Sub-Discipline. In this exercise. you place spaces in areas of the building model.Plenum. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. enter an Offset of 1' 0". select Level Above (Level 3). Under Extents. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. select Plenum Plan. for View Scale.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. In the next exercise. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. and then place spaces in various types of areas. and click Properties. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. for View Range. ■ Click OK twice. click Edit. for Level. NOTE After finishing each exercise. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. right-click Level 2 Plenum. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. enter 0. For View Classification. In this exercise. for Default View Template. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. right-click Level 2 Plenum.

Placing Spaces | 49 . 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. For Upper Limit. For Space. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. select Horizontal. walls. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. This specifies the vertical extent of the space.Space Plan is highlighted. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. For (Tag Location). select New. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Level 2 Plenum. and ceilings). For Offset. indicating that it’s the active view. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . enter 0. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared.rvt. click Training Files.

double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Click OK. 14 In the drawing area. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. 9 Select the space. For Name. enter Library. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Number.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum.7 Click to place the space. ensuring coordination between the files. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. enter 219.

and then click Modify. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. For Upper Limit. select Level 3. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. enter 0. Placing Spaces | 51 . For Offset. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. 21 Using the method learned previously.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P.

select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. you place a space in a large corridor area. under Energy Analysis. 23 Click OK. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. and then split the space using a space separation line.

and for Offset. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 0.Space Plan is highlighted. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . for Upper Limit. select Level 3. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. click Training Files. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. 5 On the Options Bar. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. and then press Esc. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space.

double-click the space name. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line.7 In the Project Browser. 9 In the floor plan. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. which was numbered 219Q. and press Enter. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. change the space number to 216A. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 10 Using the same method. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. 11 Close the schedule view. In the schedule. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. enter Corridor. the plan view would have updated with the changes. and scroll to the newly placed space. as shown.

16 Using the method learned previously.15 Press Esc twice. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). place a space in the lower area of the split space. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 .

you place a space in a chase.Space Plan is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. If necessary. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt.

select Level 3. In the plan view. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. and then click OK. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. for Upper Limit. For Number. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. 6 Enter VG. for Upper Limit. Under Identity Data. enter 225PC. 10 In the plan view. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . click in the chase area to place the space. right-click. and click Element Properties.4 Press Esc. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. enter 0. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. for Name. expand Spaces. For Offset. 12 Click in the section view. select Interior and Reference. select Roof Level. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. On the Options Bar. select the space. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. For Limit Offset. enter Chase. enter 4'.

17 Type ZF. select Space Tag With Volume. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. All spaces in the view are tagged. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. floors. under Loaded Tags.Space Plan. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. and maximize the view. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. and click OK. In the next exercises. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. 15 Press Esc. ceilings.Bounding elements (such as walls. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .

verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. it is automatically added to the Default zone. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. under Spaces. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. In this exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Training Files. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. which removes the space from the Default zone. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. indicating that it’s the active view. After a space is placed in an area. click Reference. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). click View ➤ Zones.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. To display space reference lines.Zoning is highlighted.

As you do this. and click Finish Editing Zone. and click OK. select Computer Lab 222. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. under Energy Analysis.Zoning is highlighted. indicating that the space is occupiable. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. 4 In the drawing area.rvt. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. click Reference. and modify the zone properties. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you can add or remove a space from the zone. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. click Training Files. To display space reference lines. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. Using the Edit Zone tab. and a new zone is created. and verify the zones in the System Browser. you assign spaces to zones in the building. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. indicating that it’s the active view. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Instruction 221. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. the Edit Zone tab displays. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.5 In the System Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. The graphic in the System Browser updates. Next. you assign spaces to a zone. The Zone tool is active. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. select Occupiable. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. double-click 121 Cafeteria. under Spaces. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. and Electrical 220 spaces.

Instruction. 5 With the drawing area active. To view the zone in the drawing area. Expand HVAC Zones. Click OK.In the System Browser. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. you need to activate the zone visibility. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. type VG. select HVAC Zones.

West . Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. enter 2 . 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows.Zoning is highlighted. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building.Area B. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. click Training Files.Zoning. under Identity Data. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. To display space reference lines. In the left pane of the Open dialog.West . indicating that it’s the active view. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. click Finish Editing Zone. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. click Reference. expand 2 . and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. and verify the zone in the System Browser.TIP After you finish editing the zone. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. In this exercise. and click OK. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 11 Close the System Browser. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. 9 In the System Browser. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .rvt. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. for Name. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. under Spaces.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. You activated zone visibility in the views. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs).

Zoning view. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone.Zoning view to activate it. 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 15 Press Esc. 8 In the Level 1 .Zoning floor plan. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 9 With the Add Space tool active. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. Verify that the distance is 1/2". click in the Level 2 . Select Attached End. zoom out.5 Click in the Level 1 . 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired.Zoning view.

17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . space. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. for Name Value. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. on the ViewCube.Zoning to make it the active view. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. double-click the zone tag. click Training Files. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. enter Lounge . the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. double-click Level 1 . you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. and click OK. In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Zoning view.East.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed.rvt. you verify the building. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. Front. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and zone information. click the corner where the Top.

5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. you isolate the space. Next. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. With 109 Lounge selected. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. and select 109 Lounge. verify that Wireframe is selected. Click (Highlight). Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. Using the Highlight tool. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . click (Isolate). NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red.

■ On the Details tab. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. and in the People dialog. For People. scroll down in the left pane. click . Next. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. select Lounge/Recreation. the space information displays for the selected space. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. and click OK. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. Below the list of spaces and zones. For Construction Type. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. and then click OK. and then click OK. select 1_South_Lounge. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. For Electrical Loads. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. click . Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. select 109 Lounge. verify that <Building> is selected. click . ■ ■ ■ Next. and in the Space Type Settings dialog.

For Heating Information. For Cooling Information. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. roofs. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. This indicates the heating set point. This indicates the outdoor air per person. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. verify that 74. Below the list of spaces and zones. and dehumidification set point. This indicates the cooling set point. verify that 70. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids.00 °F : N/A is specified.00 °F : 90.00 °F : 54. outdoor air per area. verify that <Building> is selected. cooling air temperature. and humidification set point.00 °F : N/A is specified. Next. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. floors. the zone information displays for the selected zone. 12 Using the methods learned previously. and other room-bounding components. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. heating air temperature.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. click (Shading). and air changes per hour.

select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). Modify space properties 19 Select the space. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. Under Energy Analysis. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. For Name. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. Because this is an unoccupied space. open MEP . select Plenum. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. select Level 3. select Plenum. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. enter 0. Under Energy Analysis. For Offset. 15 In the Project Browser. Click OK. click Cancel. enter 212P. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . for Number. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area.

space. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. enter 03101. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. For Postal Code. and select space Plenum 212P.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. double-click Level 2 . The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. for Energy Data. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Manchester. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. click in the Value field. select School or University. NH. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. and zone information. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. On the Place tab. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. you verified building. and verify that the space has replaced the void. In this exercise. For Location. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. click Edit. is selected. for City.Space Plan. under Energy Analysis.

■ In the Type Properties dialog. For People. select Specified. click Edit. 8 In the drawing area. In order to select a space. For Condition Type. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. For Building Construction.Audio Visual. and click OK. select Specified. and click Element Properties. or neither. and click OK. enter 150 Btu/h. verify that <Building> is specified. For Export Complexity. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. For Project Phase. under Volume Computations. For Sensible. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. and then click . verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). For Space Type. verify that Level 1 is selected. for Values. select space Library 219. select Heated and cooled. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. both. enter 200 Btu/h. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. for Values. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. ft. verify that Occupiable is selected. For Sliver Space Tolerance. and enter 50 sq. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. and click OK. you need to select this option. For Latent. ■ On the Weather tab. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. a cooling load. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. for Building Service.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. Under Heat Gain (per Person). Click OK twice. select Library . this option adjusts the times automatically. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. verify that 1' 0" is specified. click in the Value column. right-click. For Ground Plane. If. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Select Area per person. verify that New Construction is selected. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool.

and click to learn the cause for the warning. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . Under Power. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. select Actual. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . it should be corrected before you calculate loads. click Calculate. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. verify that School or University is selected. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis.■ ■ ■ Click OK. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and under Heating Information. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. You have verified the building information. click Information). for Values. verify that <Building> is specified. click Edit. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. Select the space associated with the warning. NH. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. for Values. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. There should be no warnings displayed. select 219 Library. For Location. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. You should correct the space error in the building model. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. Click OK twice. Next. For Building Construction. verify that Manchester. and click OK. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 12 Click the Details tab. For Building Service. is specified. select Actual. and can be modified here. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. For Electrical Loads. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog).

under Energy Analysis. 15 Review the loads report for project. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. weather. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. For Color Scheme.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. 19 In the drawing area. 16 After you review the loads report. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. select HVAC Zones. and a loads report displays. Click OK. 3 In the drawing area. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. 21 Click OK. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. In this exercise. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 17 In the loads report. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . select 219 Library. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . click to the right of the building to place the legend. indicating that it’s the active view. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser.Space Plan. space. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. or make any changes to the model. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. or zone information. and zone information for the building model. space. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes.

in 1-ton increments. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. select the color scheme legend. The new scheme displays in the view.5 Zoom in to the legend. and click OK. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . under Schemes. select Tonnage Range. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range.

74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 11 Using the method learned previously. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type.The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values.

If you select Show categories from all disciplines. select Spaces. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . Select Schedule building components. For Phase. In the next exercise. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building.12 Close the file with or without saving it. select Spaces. In this exercise. Click OK. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. for Select available fields from. enter Space Airflow Schedule. more category options are available. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i.Space Fill is the active view.rvt. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. For Name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select New Construction. click Training Files.

click (Browse).(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. select Not Between. and then click . enter . Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. and then select Hidden field. For Formula. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. enter Airflow Delta. In the Schedule Properties dialog. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule.■ Under Available fields. ■ Click Calculated Value. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. For Fields. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For Discipline. select Level. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. select Number. select Airflow Delta. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. Click OK. select HVAC. select Level. select Air Flow. In the Calculated Value dialog. Select Ascending. select Calculated Supply Airflow. and Blank line. For Then by. For Type. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. for Formula. Header. In the Fields dialog. and click OK. Select Formula. and then click Conditional Format.

■ ■ ■ For Value. In the Color dialog. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. ■ The schedule displays. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. For Background Color. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. verify that Show is highlighted. In this exercise. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. Under Conditions to Use. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. and click OK. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . 7 Close the file with or without saving it. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. right-click to access schedule properties. select red. Click OK twice. In later exercises. click the color swatch. a view opens that contains the selected space. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. In the next lesson. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces.

78 .

you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. you modify air terminal parameters. Then. 79 . After completing the air systems lesson. As you place the air terminals. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP).Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. In this lesson. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. you will create supply air systems. After system creation. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. and work with the airflow schedule.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . When you highlight a space using the cursor. 3 In the ceiling view. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. the space crossing lines display.rvt.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and scroll to space 223. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser.

8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. and press Enter. 17 Move the cursor down. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . Also. type 12.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . The schedule updates with the new flow data. If the host element is modified or moved. and press Enter. and select Supply Diffuser . Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. enter 425 CFM.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. and then press Esc to end the command. 9 On the Placement panel. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. and then select both Copy and Multiple. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. click Place on Face. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. the hosted elements are updated as well. 15 On the Options Bar.Rectangular Face Round Neck . as shown. verify that Constrain is cleared. for Flow. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. select the diffuser. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. 13 On the Options Bar. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. which in this case is the ceiling grid. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.

If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. select one of the diffusers. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 29 Place 2 diffusers. 25 In the drawing area. as shown. As you place the return diffusers. 28 On the Placement tab.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. click Yes. clear Leader. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM.rfa. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and click Open. click Place on Face. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. and then press Esc. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. 24 In the Open dialog. 21 On the Options Bar. 22 In the drawing area. Next. 27 Select Return Diffuser .

select Strong Reference. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . and click OK. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Yes. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. for Reference. select one of the return diffusers. 32 In the Project Browser. Level. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. under Other. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. 31 In the alert dialog. and click to select the lines.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. as shown. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. ■ ■ For the end point. and click OK. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. enter 9' 0"2750. for Constraints ➤ Offset. For the start point. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. click the Level 1 line. 44 Zoom in to space 115. Verify that the measured distance is 9'.

you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. click Training Files. After creating the logical connection. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Press Esc. the space crossing lines display. verify that Design ➤ HVAC .Design is highlighted. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. In this exercise.HVAC Plan . 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. right-click the title. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing.rvt. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. However. You then create the logical connection between the system components. When you highlight a space. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. including energy analysis. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and click View ➤ Systems. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .

and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. System Name. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. 12 In the System Browser. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. On the Options Bar. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. review the Number of Elements. Connect Into. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. and Flow value. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. 15 Click Cancel. the number of elements is updated. As you add diffusers to systems. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. 6 Keep the System Browser open. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 11 In the drawing area.

17 Using the method learned previously. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. In this exercise. Rename the system Next. under Identity Data. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. the air terminals are the children. which updates the name in the System Browser. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. 22 Click OK. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). for System Name. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. and the system connects them. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. 25 Click OK. 18 Click OK. under Mechanical. for Mark. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 26 Click Finish Editing System. In this exercise.

rvt. A Generate Layout tab displays. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. for Solution Type. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . When you highlight a space using the cursor. and display solution 1. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch).HVAC Plan. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. select Network. 4 In the drawing area. which provides various layout tools. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. In this case. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. select the upper left diffuser. Also. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 5 On the Options Bar.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. the space crossing lines display. the Network type provides several solutions.

click Settings. click Modify. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures.7 On the Options Bar. enter 3'. For Duct Type. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . For Offset. Select Branch. For Maximum Flex Duct Length. For Flex Duct Type. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. as shown. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Click OK. you’ll get an error in a later step. For Offset. enter 9' 10 1/2". If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. For Duct Type.Round. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. enter 9' 10 1/2". select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees.

Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . or offset elevations are incorrect. For example. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification.11 Click Finish Layout. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. or manually modify the duct. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. select a different layout solution. as is the elbow itself. Either relocate the system components. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added.

and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. The first time you press Tab. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. select By View. Usually. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. thus it is not part of the system. for Color Scheme. highlight a segment of the main duct. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. select Duct Color Fill . Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. under Graphics. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. Using a flow-based color scheme. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. and click OK. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. but not all values are used in this view. fittings. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. for Values Displayed. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. a disconnection exists. If the entire network does not highlight. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. and equipment. and then click OK. and click to select it.Flow.

19 In the Instance Properties dialog. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and click OK. for Flow. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and then press Esc to clear the selection. and press Enter. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. select one of the diffusers in the system. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. select Duct Color Fill . select the color scheme legend. for Schemes. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. 20 In the drawing area.Airflow. 26 Click OK. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM.Velocity. and on the Options Bar. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. under Mechanical . select the WSHP. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog.

for Branch Sizing. Click OK. Select Restrict Height. and select 16". The ductwork and fittings are updated. click Cancel. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. Under Constraints. select Friction. and then click to select it.08 in-wg/100ft. and enter . and drag it to the right. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). highlight a segment of the duct. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. Select Only.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. select Calculated Size Only. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Select the upper segment of main duct. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog.

and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. static pressure. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . Using this tool. and pressure loss. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. pressure. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). Use the information that displays (flow.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i.rvt. 35 Click Finish. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .NOTE As you inspect a system. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. also known as the critical path.

Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . and select the WSHP. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. and click to specify the end of the main duct. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location.HVAC Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click Draw Duct. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors).Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view.

right-click the connector grip. and click Draw Duct.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 .8 Press Esc twice to end the command. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. Front. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 11 On the Options Bar. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. select the top right diffuser. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . click the corner where the Top. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown.3D MEP. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. 14 In the Project Browser. select 9' 10 1/2". 15 On the ViewCube. for Offset. double-click MEP . Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. NOTE When drawing duct.

it is considered a closed loop. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. the color fill indicates the flow value. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. Also. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct.16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. The ductwork is automatically created. 19 In the drawing area. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. in space 115. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). 22 Using the same method.

24 Select the remaining diffusers. You can ignore the warning. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. and select the top left diffuser. 25 Press Esc. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. zoom in to the open end of the main duct.

30 Press Esc twice. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. and click to select it. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). and then click Modify.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown.

such as a plenum. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. and click OK. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection.Airflow. for Flow. clear Restrict Height. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. under Mechanical . 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. select a segment of the main duct. and then click OK. under Constraints. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. 40 Using the same method. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

Automatically and manually lay out piping. including 2 base mounted pumps. 109 .Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. and a cooling tower located on the roof. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. Then. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. In this lesson. Create return and supply piping systems.

including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . click Training Files.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. you place mechanical equipment.rvt. on level 3 of the building model. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. verify that Wall faces is selected. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. as shown. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan .Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component.High Efficiency . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and select WSHP . 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing.Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . indicating that it’s the active view. in corridor 328.Design is highlighted.Left Return .Horizontal . 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.2-6 Tons . and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. 7 On the Options Bar.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view.

(Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. 10 Select the WSHP. as shown. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. verify that the WSHP is still selected. and click to place the dimension. as shown.8 Click the corridor wall face. click the top edge of the WSHP. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and enter 2'. click the dimension. and in the Type Selector. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

enter 12 GPM. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. for Water Flow. enter 9'. as shown. and click to place it in the mechanical room. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. Under Mechanical. for Offset. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. Click OK. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.14 Click Modify. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. select the 2 WSHPs.

114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. including flow and pressure. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. you create the return and supply piping systems.21 Click Modify. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. Create the logical connection between the system components. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components.

Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. but without a corresponding system. You can create pipes to connect system components. Unlike logical connections (systems).HVAC Plan . and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. right-click the Systems column heading. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. analyses cannot be performed. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline.IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. and click View ➤ Piping. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .rvt.Mech 330). Creating a Piping System | 115 .Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. where it is easier to review the information. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. 5 In the System Browser. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building.

the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. Notice that on the Options Bar. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. select the boiler. and the Edit System tool is not active. Assigning a system component to an existing system. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area.In the System Browser. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 10 On the Options Bar. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 12 In the drawing area. for System Name. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. As you assign equipment to systems. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. This display indicates that the system is selected. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. Therefore. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. select the 2 WSHPs. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. while pressing Ctrl. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system.

Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. double-click Roof . enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply.HVAC Plan . and select the cooling tower. You have created the hydronic return system. Creating a Piping System | 117 . 17 On the Options Bar. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system.Design ➤ Floor Plans.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties.Design.13 Click Finish Editing System. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. for System Name. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. 19 In the Project Browser. under Design ➤ HVAC .

23 Close the roof plan view. and click OK. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. and bypasses the cooling tower. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. expand the Hydronic Return system category. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. 28 Using the same method. In cooling mode. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs.22 In the Select Connector dialog. 25 Select the boiler. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Select. 29 Right-click CHWS. indicating the logical connection. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. In heating mode. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. and click Expand All. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. 26 Click Finish Editing System. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category.

right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. expand Piping.In the System Browser. enter 18 GPM. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. including the flow rate and size of the component. and click Column Settings. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. you can view several parameters. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. for Water Flow. under Mechanical. and click OK. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. 32 In the System Browser. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. and click Properties. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. You also manually modify the layout path as required.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Notice that all components within the Level 3 .HVAC Plan . 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). 10 Click OK. indicating that it’s the active view.Mech 330).HVAC plan view range are highlighted. then the Select a System dialog displays. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 9 In the Select a System dialog. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). 5 In the Filter dialog. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. select CHWR. A system preview displays in red.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . click Training Files. the boiler. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. and click OK. press Tab to highlight the system.Design is highlighted. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering.rvt. click Check None. select Mechanical Equipment. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . When you draw a box to select components. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you can place the cursor over a system component. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. and click to select it.

You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. For Inset. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. duct. structural beams. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. 13 Click Cancel. enter 1' 6''. or architectural components. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created.11 On the Options Bar. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. verify that Solutions is selected. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. It does not reference the architecture. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . select Perimeter. click Settings. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 14 On the Generate Layout tab.

to display the path with thinner lines. 19 In the drawing area. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. and press Tab 3 times.16 Click Finish Layout. 17 Optionally. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. With each Tab. and the flow for the other is 12. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. the flow for one WSHP is 18. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network.

and click OK. 24 Press Esc. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. 23 Under Mechanical. under Mechanical. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). and access its instance properties. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 22 Select the boiler.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs.

Next. Logically. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 32 Click Finish Editing System. 27 On the System Tools panel. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . double-click Level 1 . 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. On the Options Bar.HVAC Plan .26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. you physically close the CHWR loop. 28 In the Project Browser. which propagates flow throughout the system. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR).Design. click Edit System. the Number of Elements is now 8. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.

and then close the Instance Properties dialog. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. select a WSHP. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. as shown. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). 35 Using the drag control. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. and click Cancel. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 .34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. 38 Using the same method. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical. access its instance properties.

126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. select Perimeter 1 of 5.40 In the Select a System dialog. enter 0''/12''. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. and then click OK. Click Settings. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. For Inset. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. select CHWS. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 41 Click OK. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. For Slope. enter 1' 6''.

47 In the drawing area. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 . In a later exercise. as shown. 48 While pressing Ctrl. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). (Both sections are at the same elevation. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. 46 Click Modify.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. as shown.

128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Either relocate the system components. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. Add piping to close the supply loop. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise.50 Using the same method. or manually modify the pipe. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. or offset elevations are incorrect. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. select a different layout solution. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). 51 Click Finish Layout. To create the piping system. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system.

Design is highlighted. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog.rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple.HVAC Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. as shown. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and the return pipes are magenta. As you work in the training file. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . double-click 3D HVAC Building.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Design ➤ 3D Views. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler.

130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. 7 In the plan view. as shown. 6 Press Delete.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. select the section of piping.

10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. Click to specify the reference point. ■ Move the cursor up 4''. and press Esc to clear the selection. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . ■ Click to move the piping. select the boiler. 9 In the 3D view.

12 In the 3D view. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. The connections are automatically created. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. and the lower one is secondary. and click OK. 13 In the plan view. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. select the boiler. and click Draw Pipe. select the return pipe riser. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments.7''. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. for Offset. ■ Move the cursor down. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. and you select 1 connector. enter 1' . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . and press Enter.In a plan view. enter 2'. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right.

and select it. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click OK. 19 In the plan view. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. 18 Press Esc twice. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. As you place piping runs that are close together. as shown. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. select the primary base mounted pump. and the appropriate fittings are created.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range.

zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. and when the connector point displays. and click Draw Pipe. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. 28 Press Esc. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. and click to draw the pipe. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . 27 Move the cursor to the right. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. 29 If necessary. click to connect to the pump. right-click the bottom connector. you select the tee fitting. and click the minus symbol.

right-click the discharge connector. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. and click to create the pipe. and click Draw Pipe. select the primary base mounted pump. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 31 On the Options Bar. for Offset. enter 4'. 33 Press Esc.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view.

as shown. these pipe connections were created automatically. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. 35 Using the method learned previously. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 .Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps.

36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. and click to create the pipe. type 1'. for Offset. ■ Move the cursor down. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the bottom control on the tee. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. enter 9' 6''. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and press Enter.

select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. You now have a closed loop system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . Next.37 Click Modify. right-click. and click Element Properties. you validate the flow through the system.

46 Press Esc. select the cooling tower. 41 Using the same method. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the Instance Properties dialog. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . for Cooling Water Flow. as shown. right-click. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. 40 Click Cancel. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. view the properties for the secondary pump. under Mechanical. The flow is being propagated through the piping. Connect the cooling tower Next. the value is 0 GPM. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. When you create the pumps in parallel. 48 In the plan view. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. 43 Press Esc. under Mechanical. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. and click OK. 44 In the 3D view.50 or 50% of the Flow. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). and click Element Properties. notice that under Mechanical. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. notice that Flow is 125 GPM. 42 Click OK.

49 Press Esc. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system.■ Lower pipe (outlet).

You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode).rvt. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. and close the dialog. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. When the valve is open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select the cooling tower.50 In the 3D View. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Adding Valves In this exercise. click Training Files. the water bypasses the cooling tower. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. and is heated by the boiler.

8 Press Esc twice. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. verify that the Diameter value is 3''.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 4 On the Options Bar. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel.HVAC Plan . Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. and select Ball Valve . indicating that it’s the active view. Adding Valves | 143 . as shown. The bypass valve is closed by default. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down.Design is highlighted.Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve.

10 Press Esc. place another Ball Valve . 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. parallel to the previously placed valve. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 12 Select Ball Valve .2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. 14 Using the same method.

under Mechanical. and click OK. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. and select Ball Valve . and click Element Properties. and select Ball Valve . Adding Valves | 145 . validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. verify that Flow is 0 GPM. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. right-click. 20 Select the bypass valve. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower).2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. In heating mode. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower).Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). (This valve allows the water to flow through it. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. 19 Using the same method.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. Initially. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.Design is highlighted. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.HVAC Plan . The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Sizing Pipe In this exercise. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM.22 Using the method you just learned. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. as shown. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .

This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. click Pipe Color Fill . 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select Pipe Color Fill . This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. for Schemes. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. Sizing Pipe | 147 .Flow. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and click OK.Size. and click OK.

148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. for Branch Sizing. and for Velocity. and enter 2. Click OK. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. enter 5 FPS.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. Select And. and click to select the branch.25 FT/100ft. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. Under Constraints. select Friction. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. 13 Press Esc. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). select Larger of Connector and Calculated.

you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. select a different layout solution. or offset elevations are incorrect. pressure. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. or manually modify the pipe. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ 3D Views. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. Inspecting the System | 149 . The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. Inspecting the System In this exercise. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Training Files. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Using the System Inspector. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. Either relocate the system components. 14 Close the file with or without saving it.

and pressure information including pressure loss.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. as required. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. An inspection flag reports the section number. flow. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). This information helps you modify the system design. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . and the Pressure Loss is 1. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. 10 Click Finish.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. select 90° F.88 psi. targeting those systems that need attention. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 9 Using the same method. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design.67 psi. and click OK. as shown. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. for Fluid Temperature.89 psi. inspect Section 6 again. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. you need to validate them. the Static Pressure is 7. In this exercise. and to size pipe.

The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. and double-click Level 3 . Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. thus assigning the components to a system. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. right-click the Systems titlebar. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder.HVAC Plan . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. and click Show to view all of the system components. 9 Right-click CHWS. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. In the System Browser. double-click Level 1 . Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system).HVAC Plan . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. After you have assigned all components to systems. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 4 In the System Browser.Design. If you place components without assigning them to a system. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. the pipe is associated with that system. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. 6 In the Project Browser. and click View. Warnings display.Design. and for pipe sizing.rvt. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. 7 In the System Browser. click Training Files. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. As you learned when placing components. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Design ➤ Floor Plans. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. After you assign components to a system. For example.

and select Level 3 . click Close. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. 13 Right-click CHWR. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system.Design floor plan.TIP If you have multiple views open. 10 Using the same methods. 12 In the System Browser. otherwise. expand the Unassigned folder. right-click Hydronic Return. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. and confirm unassigned system components. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components.HVAC Plan . You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . and click Expand All. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. 14 Using the methods that you learned.

154 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system. 155 .Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial.

156 .

Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Define required lighting. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 . Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings.

2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. select 75. For Temperature Rating. and demand factors that are applied in the design.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. select Wiring Types. In this exercise you review electrical settings.Wire Sizes. enter 1. click (Open). In the left pane of the Open dialog. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. speeding up the design phase. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select Copper. You also add a wiring type. click Training Files. Select Correction Factor.04. ■ Click New Correction Factor. select Copper. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Temperature. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. As you place components and create circuits. enter THHN. ■ ■ For Factor. select 90. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System .rvt. distribution systems. Click OK. For Material. ■ ■ For Material. expand Wiring . Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. wiring.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

■ ■ For Value. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . 16 Close the file with or without saving it. select Red. for Custom Colors. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. Click OK three times. Click Background Color. enter -5 fc and 5 fc.

using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. Use the System Browser to check your design. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. power circuits. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. Then. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. Create a panel schedule. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. First. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. Create power loads. as you place lighting fixtures. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. 167 .

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Under Scheme Definition. By using orange as the color for this range. for the Spaces Category. select Average Estimated Illumination.rvt.Lighting Color Fill view is open. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. In the Color dialog. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. select Orange. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. select the color legend. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. You can create additional color schemes.00 fc. select the color for Less Than 20. Click OK. 2 In the drawing area. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. for Basic Colors.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.00 fc. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. click Training Files. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. click (Open).

Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active.5 fc range. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 13 Click the Level 2 . Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 .Lighting Ceiling plan. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 8 In the Project Browser. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 .5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . The red field will clear once the +/.5 fc range is satisfied. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. which is the lowest value in the specified range.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . zoom to space Library 219.277.7 In the Project Browser. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc.

23 Click OK.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . In the Space Lighting Analysis view. select Multiple. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 19 Press ESC to end the command. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 18 Click to place the fixture. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. 25 On the Options Bar. 20 Select the lighting fixture. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. the fixtures will move accordingly. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.

28 In the drawing area. select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown. 30 On the Options Bar. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . select the 3 fixtures.NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 27 Press ESC to end the command.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically. Note the value in red for the space Library 219. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .32 Press ESC. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.

36 In the Filter dialog. click Check None. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 .35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select Lighting Fixtures. and for Category. Click OK.277V. 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) .

The values in the schedule are updated automatically. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 . click the ceiling grid line as shown. select Multiple Alignment. The lighting delta is satisfied. 42 In the drawing area. 41 On the Options Bar. Note the changes for the space Library 219.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) .277V.

43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The fixture aligns.

Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 .45 Press ESC to end the command. you modify the light fixture IES files. click Training Files. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. In the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 46 Close the file with or without saving it. click (Open). and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures.

5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 .Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis.Lighting Color Fill plan. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view.Lighting Plan. 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. scroll to view space space Library 219. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 2 Tile the views as shown.

and click OK. Click OK. for Apparent Load. Under Photometrics.85. click the value for Light Loss Factor. Under Photometrics.00 lm. select 463T5_S. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. select Xenon and click OK.93. select T5 [HO]. Under Electrical. In the Select File dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. enter F15.ies and click Open. select Luminous Flux.00 VA. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog.277V and click OK. for Ballast Loss Factor. In the Name dialog. ■ Click OK twice. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. enter . for Color Preset. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. specify 15000. click the value for Initial Color. click the value for Initial Intensity. for Lamp. enter 162. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. ■ Click Apply. Under Photometrics. Under Identity Data. ■ Under Photometrics.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. enter . for Type Mark.

12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures. 10 In the Filter dialog. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click Check None. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated. and for Category.277V. Click OK. select Lighting Fixtures. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown.

select the top center fixture. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. 15 In space Library 219.Press Delete. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . Note the lighting delta updates again. 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type.

Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown.17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

click (Open). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. junction boxes. 2 In the drawing area. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Junction Boxes. click Training Files. 19 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. In the next exercise. Placing Switches.Press Delete. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. Placing Switches. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. and Receptacles | 183 . you add switches. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Junction Boxes. and receptacles to your design.

5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown.277V. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor . Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 7 Click to place the switch.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared .

rfa and click Open.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector. The element type Junction Boxes . 12 In the Load Family dialog. Placing Switches. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 9 Press ESC to end the command.NoLoad. and Receptacles | 185 . Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. Junction Boxes. Select Junction Boxes .8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown.

Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. 15 Select the junction box. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. In the Type Properties dialog. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. enter 9’0”. Under Electrical. Click Edit Type. for Level 2 . 21 In the drawing area. Click OK twice.14 Press ESC to end the command. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . enter JB-1NL.Offset. note the Number of Poles is 1. NOTE When entering values. for Mark. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. zoom to space Library 219. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.

This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. and Receptacles | 187 . Placing Switches. Space Number. 26 In the System Browser. and Number of Elements. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Select Load. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. NOTE If necessary. and Voltage. Distribution System. right-click and click Column Settings. Expand General. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. Select Size. 23 In the System Browser. Junction Boxes. Click OK. 24 For any column. Expand Electrical. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Space Name.

27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 31 Close the System Browser. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles.

39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 40 On the Options Bar. and Receptacles | 189 . Junction Boxes. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. select Copy and Multiple. 38 Select the receptacle. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. Placing Switches.

190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 42 Move the cursor down.41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle. move the cursor along the wall. and enter 12’ and press ENTER.

and Receptacles | 191 . Placing Switches. Junction Boxes.43 Press ESC to end the command.

46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown.

you need to create logical connections to define the topology. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 .48 Close the file with or without saving it. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire.

and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. click Training Files.rvt. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). and work toward the higher voltage. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). zoom to the space Electrical 220.equipment. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding wiring to a project is optional. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 2 In the drawing area. click (Open). then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment.

14 Select the panelboard. #1 Pole Breakers. select 480/277 Wye. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 9 On the Options Bar. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. 7 Press ESC to end the command. for Distribution System.Loads. For Panel Name. 8 Select the panelboard. for Max.Surface: 100A. for Distribution System.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . enter PP-2B. enter 20.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . Click OK. select 120/208 Wye. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

click Check None. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter LP-2B. 20 In the drawing area. Click OK. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 23 In the Filter dialog.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. Click OK. and for Category. #1 Pole Breakers. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. For Panel Name. zoom to space Instruction 221. enter 20. which is the logical connection between the elements. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. for Max. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser.Loads.

The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.

Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 33 Select the switch on the right. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way. 32 Press ESC.28 Press ESC to end the command. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

35 Select the left three-way switch. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit.34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 .

for Hot Conductors. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 41 In the Filter dialog. click Check None. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. except without wire. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. enter 2. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. Click OK. 38 Press ESC to end the command. Next you create circuits without showing wire. click (Open). and for Category.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Click OK. select Wires. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Loads.

Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. right-click on the Systems heading. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. expand Power. 2 In the drawing area.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then expand circuit 1. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. Voltage. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. Rating. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. 13 In the System Browser. Distribution System. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. click Training Files. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings.rvt. ■ 16 In the System Browser. Expand Electrical. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. and Voltage Drop are selected. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. Click OK. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. and verify that Load. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 .

under Electrical. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. change the Voltage to 277V. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. 22 With the junction box still selected. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 30 Close the System Browser. Click OK. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it.

37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Identity Data. note the label parameters and click Cancel. click Edit Type. click below the first one to place it. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. Click OK. Click Tags. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. Click Yes. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. 40 Click OK twice. enter FR4. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . 35 Press ESC to end the command. for Type Mark. 47 In the drawing area. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard.

57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. select Lighting Fixture Tags. and for Category. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. enter a comma. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. Click Save. Deselect Break and for Suffix. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. and click Apply. select Break. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 56 In the Filter dialog. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .rfa. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. Click OK. click Check None. Click OK. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. for File Name. Click OK.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. For Circuit Number. Next you create a switch system. 52 In the Save As dialog. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area.

click (Open). enter a. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. click Training Files. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.rvt. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. under Electrical Lighting. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. for Switch ID. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 2 In the drawing area. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. Click OK.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 9 Select the occupancy sensor.

under Electrical . 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID.Lighting. for switch ID. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter b. Click OK. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures.

4 In the Filter dialog. Circuits are used for power. select Electrical Fixtures. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system.26 Close the file with or without saving it. click (Open). In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Next you create a circuit and size wire. click Training Files. and data systems. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. click Check None. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). Creating Power Loads | 207 . 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power.rvt. select the PP-2B panel. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 7 In space Electrical 220. lighting. Click OK. 2 In the drawing area. and for Category.

10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. enter 2. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. 13 Select the wire again. 19 Click OK. and in the right pane. and click Open. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. for Hot Conductors. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. under Electrical . select Wiring. and in the drawing area. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. select Long Wire Tick Mark. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. and click Element Properties.rfa.Loads. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. Click OK. 15 In the Load Family dialog. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

22 In space Electrical 220. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. Creating Power Loads | 209 . press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. select the PP-2B panel. and click to select the circuit. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. as shown.

and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. 29 In space Instruction 221. 28 In the drawing area. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . in space Instruction 221. click the connector of the first receptacle. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. as shown.26 Press Delete.

click Open. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. zoom to space Electrical 220. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. click Training Files. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. select panel LP-2B. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the drawing area. 3 In the Electrical space. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. Finally.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221.rvt. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Next you balance the loads for your design. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 .

while Phase B provides 2004 VA. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 12 Select panel PP-2B. 1-#12. Notice that the loads on Phase A. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. for Rating. Scroll down. click Rebalance Loads. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. 1-#12.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 1-#10. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 14 Close the warning dialog. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 1-#10. Under Electrical-Loads.3616 VA). 6 Click OK. Click OK.3712 VA. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. B. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. enter 30A. Phase B 3636 VA. and Phase C .

26 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. enter 30A. Click OK. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. for Rating. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. for Rating. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. and click OK. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1.rvt. Next you create a panel schedule. 17 Close the warning dialog. click Training Files. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B.15 Select panel PP-2B. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. click (Open). Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. Select PP-2B. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. enter 25A. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Electrical . 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection.Loads. under Electrical . and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating.Loads. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. and click OK.

click Training Files. expand Sheets (all). 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. enter 1/8.Panel Schedules. for Font. for Appearance. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. Under Header Text.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 6 In the Project Browser. 4 Close the report. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. click Edit. Under Header Text. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. click (Open). The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 5 In the Project Browser. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. 7 Select the schedule. 11 Click OK twice. select Bold and Italic. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. under Other. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Berlin Sans FB. Under Body Text. and open E601 .rvt. enter 3/32. for Font Size. for Font Size. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. 12 Close the file with or without saving it.

and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. select space Lounge 212. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. In the System Browser. each with a load of 180VA. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. press TAB once. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. In the System Browser. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. Expand Unassigned. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. Checking Your Design | 215 . Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits.

19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 15 In the dialog. for Panel. 16 Close the details dialog. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 23 Close the file with or without saving it. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 18 Select panel LP-2C. under Warnings. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 20 On the Options Bar. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. select MDP-1. zoom to space Electrical 214. 17 In the drawing area.

217 .Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.

218 .

and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. 219 . You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. type PVC . in addition to loading existing families.Vent. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan.rvt.Plumbing Plan . and click Properties. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design ➤ Floor Plans.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project.Sanitary. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. you create a PVC pipe type. and verify that Level 1 . click Training Files.Design is open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click PVC . In this lesson. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Adding a pipe size. 4 In the Name dialog. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. planning is critical to a successful design. and click OK. 2 In the Project Browser.

DWV. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. click Pipe Settings. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog.DWV: Standard. click Training Files. select Sanitary. select Tee. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. enter 27/32''. In the Project Browser. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. enter -4' . select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. Tap. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System .DWV: Standard. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. 17 In the left pane.0''. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. For Offset. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 22 Click New Size. 27 For the new pipe size. 25 For Outside. enter 10°. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . 10 On the Selection panel. select Sanitary. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. for Nominal. Cross. 15 For System Type. 21 In the right pane. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. enter 1/2''. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. 24 For Inside Diameter. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. enter 5/8''.Sch 40 .Sch 40 . select Plastic. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . PVC .5 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 In the right panel.Sch 40 . 26 Click OK. under Mechanical.PVC . and click OK.Vent is listed.PVC . under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Branch. click Modify. 18 For System Type. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 6 Click OK. and click Main.PVC . verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. for Material. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. Tee. select Tee Vent . Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane.rfa. under Pipe Types. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. select None. select Tee Reducing Double Vent .

Create the sanitary plumbing system. including plumbing fixtures. Create the hot water system. Create the cold water system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. sanitary piping. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. 221 . add a hot water heater. and hot and cold water piping. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. vent.

including the men’s room (space Male 107). 1 urinal. and verify that Level 1 .Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise. as shown. move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt. NOTE To identify a space name and number.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. you add 2 toilets. click Training Files. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser.Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan.Plumbing Plan .

6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. 4 On the Element panel. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 1 wall-mounted urinal. in the Type Selector. 5 On the Placement panel. as shown.1. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. select Public . Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls.Flush Valve . against the left wall.Wall Mounted. under Water Closet .6 gpf. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 . and 3 sinks. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select 3/4'' Flush Valve. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector. and press Esc. under Urinal . 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces. use the reference line to center the fixture. above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again.) 8 Press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line.7 Click to place another toilet.Wall Hung. zoom in closer.

Rectangular. you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. In placing the fixture. under Floor Drain . select 5''x5'' Strainer . click Place on Face. 12 On the Placement panel. 14 Click Modify. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 .2'' Drain.

18 Expand the Unassigned folder. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. and click View ➤ Piping. and a floor drain. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. 21 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. a urinal. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). and review the components listed under this system.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click Training Files. In this exercise. right-click in the System Browser table heading. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. and Default Domestic Cold Water. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

8 In the Filter dialog. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 . starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. and verify that Level 1 . open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design ➤ Floor Plans. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.Design is open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 2 In the Project Browser. 6 In the plan view. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.Plumbing Plan . and click OK. clear Lines (<Overhead>).Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser.

the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. 12 On the Edit System panel. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. click Finish Editing System. so the Create Sanitary System is available. 13 In the Systems Browser. 11 On the Options Bar. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. enter Sanitary 107. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. for System Name. If you deselected the drain. expand Sanitary.

select Sanitary 107. 16 In the Select a System dialog. select one of the components in the system. at the midpoint of the detail lines. as shown. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. for example. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. The base is placed. and click OK.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. a toilet. A preview of the piping layout displays. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet.

The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. You accept this suggested solution. enter -1' 0''. and click Settings. enter -1' 0''. 27 Click Modify. for Slope. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. and click OK. 25 On the Options Bar. and modify it to meet project requirements. enter -4'-0”. select Branch. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. select 4''. The default settings are automatically modified.19 On the Options Bar. select Main. 24 In the left pane. for Diameter. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. for Offset. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 21 On Options Bar. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. click Solutions. select Intersections. enter 1/8'' / 12''. 23 For Offset. and for Offset. 26 On the Options Bar. for Solution Type.

29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow).Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. select the vertical route path segments. and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .

31 Click Modify. as shown. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main.30 In the 3D view. use the ViewCube to orient the view. as shown. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

click Finish Layout. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. 34 On the Generate Layout panel.33 Using the previous method. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .

and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. select the fitting and click to reorient it. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. When a fitting is reversed.

38 Close the file with or without saving it.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. and check the slope control. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. you continue with the work from the last exercise. adding sinks in the men’s room. as shown.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and verify that Level 1 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. in the Type Selector.rvt. click Training Files. 5 On the Placement panel. select 22''x22'' .Design is open. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 4 On the Element panel.Rectangular.Public. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i. under Lavatory .Plumbing Plan . 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. as shown. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107).

7 Click Modify. select Multiple. enter 2' 4''. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. 8 Select the sink. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . TIP When entering dimensions. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. and press Enter to create a second sink. On the Options Bar. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. For example.

and press Enter to create the third sink. 15 Click the 3 sinks. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. 12 In the drawing area. 11 In the System Browser. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. click Finish Editing System. 16 On the Edit System panel.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Press Esc. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. click Add To System.

right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. as shown. 19 In the 3D view. use the ViewCube to orient the view. with the tee fitting selected. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal.Design ➤ 3D Views.In the System Browser. under Design ➤ Plumbing . 20 Select the fitting. and click Draw Pipe. 22 In the plan view. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. double-click 3D Plumbing. 21 Select the tee. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee.

27 Click Modify. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. In this example. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click Apply. 26 On the Options Bar.6''. When you press the Spacebar. for Offset. enter 2' . NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. for Slope. press Spacebar. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 24 On the Options Bar. enter 1/8'' / 12''. and click to draw the pipe.

31 Click Modify.DWV. 32 Select the double wye fitting. move the cursor over the stub pipe. 29 In the Type Selector. under Wye 45 Deg Double . select Standard.Sch 40 . click to place the fitting.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.PVC . and when the vertical center line displays. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. 30 In the 3D view.

and click Draw Pipe. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. 36 In the section view. In the next steps. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. enter 6''.33 With the fitting selected. enter 1'. and press Enter. zoom in to the double wye fitting. 34 Press Esc. for Offset. right-click the right connector. on the Options Bar. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . you add pipe segments to the double wye. double-click the section head to open the section view. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. and press Enter. 37 Select the fitting.

as shown.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . and click to place the pipe. 41 Using the same method. 40 Click Modify. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). 42 Click Modify.

and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. and click Draw Pipe. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . right-click the bottom connector. and press Esc. 47 Move the cursor down. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. 49 Using the same method. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. press Spacebar. 48 Click Modify.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. enter 6''. 46 In the section view.

Sch 40 . 54 Click Modify. under Trap P . click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps.PVC . You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. 52 In the plan view. 51 In the Type Selector. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. select Standard.DWV. 55 In the 3D view. 53 Using the same method. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. select the P-Trap on the left.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 56 Using the same method.

click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. Move the cursor to the left. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 58 Using the same method. select the left P-Trap.. connect the right sink to the double wye.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Click Modify. Click in the plan view. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. Select the double wye pipe on the left. In the plan view. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. enter 6''. and press Enter.

select the section of pipe you just drew. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 .■ In the 3D view. as shown. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. while pressing Ctrl. click Finish to select the recommended solution. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. under Pipe Types. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. On the Routing Solutions panel. In the Type Selector. and select a proposed solution. while pressing Ctrl. Press Esc. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. select PVC Sanitary.

rvt.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. adjusting the sanitary stack. 62 On the Options Bar. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. click Training Files. and verify the slope. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. for Slope. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. click Finish. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Design.DWV. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Plumbing Plan . select the elbow fitting on the right. 9 In the Type Selector. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 10 In the 3D view.Overall. 7 On the Selection panel. and click the intersection to place the fitting. and click to draw the pipe. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. as shown. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend . 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . select the vertical stack.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser.Design. right-click the top connector.Sch 40 . click Modify. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . 3 In the Section view. select Standard. 5 Select the tee. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Floor level line. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. and click Draw Pipe.PVC .

PVC . 13 Click the rotate control once. 18 In the plan view. under Plug . enter 1'-0”. as shown.Sch 40 . select Standard. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .DWV. and click the rotate control to change the orientation. 17 In the Type Selector. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. 14 On the Options Bar.11 Click Modify. 15 Press Esc. for Offset. 12 Select the fitting. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.

The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Creating the Cold Water System | 251 . 20 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.Plumbing Plan . and verify that Level 1 .rvt. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i. you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.19 Click Modify.Design is open. Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

double-click 3D Plumbing . select Domestic Cold Water. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. 14 In the System Browser.) 10 Click OK. 9 In the left pane. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. For Offset. click Check None. under Design ➤ Plumbing . and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. and sinks. minimize the Sanitary system. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. and click OK. 15 In the plan view.Design ➤ 3D Views. for System Type. and click Main.Overall. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. and for System Type. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select Branch.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. for System Type. select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset. select Pipe Types: Water. if necessary. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. select Branch. select Plumbing Fixtures. select Domestic Hot Water. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. expand Unassigned. 6 In the left pane. 17 In the Filter dialog. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. verify that the value is 9' 0''. 4 In the right pane. urinal. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Main. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 7 In the left pane. enter 9' 3''. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. select Domestic Hot Water. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. draw a selection box to select the toilets.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system.

click Edit System. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. enter DCW 107.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. For Flow Conversion Method. click Finish Editing System. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . Notice that the water main displays in blue. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. 21 On the Edit System panel. 19 On the System Tools panel. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. In the System Browser. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack.

for Offset.2 7/8''. and click the connector. 36 Move the cursor to the left. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. For Offset. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 34 In the plan view. and click Draw Pipe. 37 On the Options Bar. right-click the top DCW connector. 33 Click Modify. under Pipe Types. enter 3' . press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. 31 On the Options Bar. enter 10'. enter 0”/12”. enter 7''. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. 32 Move the cursor to the right. For Slope. and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. and click to place the pipe. select the sink above the urinal. connect the second toilet. 28 In the Type Selector. at the intersection of the water main pipe. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .25 Using the same method. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. enter 4'0”. select 3/4''. and press Enter. as shown. 35 In the Type Selector. click to the left of the urinal. 30 In the plan view. as shown. select Water. for Offset. verify that Automatically Connect is selected.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . 42 In the Select Connector dialog. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. 40 Click Modify. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe. and click OK. and click to connect to the main cold water line.39 Move the cursor to the left. 41 Select the top sink.

44 Using the same method. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . connect the middle sink to the branch pipe. you create the hot water system. add a water heater.

Design ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. expand the Unassigned folder. while pressing Ctrl. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 6 In the plan view.Overall. click Training Files. and verify that Level 1 . select the 3 sinks. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 . and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i. 5 In the System Browser. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design is open.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing . Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser.rvt.Plumbing Plan .

You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first.Tankless.6 Gallon. select 0. 14 Click Modify. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 12 In the Type Selector. under Water Heater . enter Domestic Hot Water 107. for System Name. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. Default Domestic Cold Water. you edit the system to add equipment. In later steps. verify that DCW 107 is selected. 13 In the plan view. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. and click Edit System. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. in the Unassigned folder.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. When designing systems. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 15 In the System Browser. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. as shown. 10 In the System Browser. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. Default Domestic Hot Water. and click OK.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room.

Offset: 4' 6''. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. for Offset. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. select the water heater. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. and select Draw Pipe. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. 22 In the Type Selector. and on the Edit System panel. 24 Move the cursor up. click Finish Editing System. 26 Move the cursor to the right. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . as shown. enter 1' 6''. 27 Click Modify. right-click the middle left connector. Slope: 0''/12''. and click the water main line.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 25 On the Options Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. enter 10’. and press Enter. 19 Select the water heater.

select Domestic Hot Water 107. click Finish Editing System. and click Draw Pipe. as shown. 30 On the System Tools panel. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. select a sink.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select 4'-6''. 38 Move the cursor to the right. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). and in the System Selector. enter 1''. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. for Diameter. click Edit System. and on the Placement Tools panel. and press Enter. 36 Move the cursor down. 33 On the Edit System panel. 35 On the Options Bar. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. enter 1' 6''. and for Offset. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. for Offset. enter 9' 0''. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 37 On the Options Bar. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe.

and click just above the bottom sink. 42 Click Modify. enter 2' 8''.39 Move the cursor down. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . and press Enter. as shown. for Offset. 40 On the Options Bar. 41 Move the cursor down. enter 1’.

connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.43 In the 3D view. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal).

46 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 . 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system.

264 .

Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. 265 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.

266 .

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Duplicate. 2 Right-click Standard. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. You create a new pipe type. If the tutorial training files are not present. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. go to http://www. click Training Files. After finishing each exercise. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. However. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. In this tutorial.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you can choose to save your work. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building.autodesk. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. 267 . Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. In this lesson.

duct. For Offset. and click Properties. 6 In the Project Browser. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. In this exercise. select Main. for Material. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. For Pipe Type. For Pipe Type. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. In the next exercise. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. you create project parameters and work with schedules. verify that 9' 0" is specified. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. structural beams. In the left pane. under Mechanical. Next. For Offset. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). click Rename. select Carbon Steel. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . you modify the type properties of the pipe. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. or architectural components. 9 Click OK. select Fire Protection Wet. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. select Fire Protection Wet. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. verify that 9' 0" is selected. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. For System Type. For System Type. and then click OK. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. and enter Fire Protection Wet. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. However. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane.

under Fire Protection. Under Categories. enter Zone 1. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. For Group parameter under.Fire Protection Plan . 8 Using a crossing window. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. indicating that it’s the active view. click Add. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . select Spaces. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. the space crossing lines display. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. select Fire Protection. 6 In the drawing area. and then click OK. click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select space Instruction 221 as shown. When you highlight a space using the cursor. right-click. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. for Name. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i.Design is highlighted.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Click OK twice. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . for Sprinkler Zone. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. and click Element Properties. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select the upper half of the building. enter Sprinkler Zone.

under Fire Protection. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 In the Filter dialog. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click OK. under Fire Protection. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. and then click OK. for Sprinkler Zone.rvt. click Training Files. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. verify that only Spaces are selected. you create schedules for sprinkler design. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. 13 Using the same method. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. to which you add various parameters. including a calculated value parameter. and click OK. for Sprinkler Zone. enter Zone 2. select Zone 1. and then access instance properties.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.

Select Schedule keys. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . click Add Parameter. For Units. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. For Key name. indicating that it’s the active view. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. For Rounding. Click OK.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. select Feet and fractional inches. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. 11 Click OK twice. double-click on each column separator. Obstructed-Combustible. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. For Group parameter under. enter Protection Area Construction Type. 14 Select the new header. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 10 In the Format dialog.Design is highlighted. 6 Using the same method.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . for Name. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. select Length. enter Light. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. Click OK. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities.Fire Protection Plan . In the Maximum Spacing column. enter 15. 7 Click OK. The schedule displays. select To the nearest 1'. and on the ribbon. select Fire Protection. and click Field Format. For Name. click the Formatting tab. 9 On the Formatting tab. select Spaces. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. enter Maximum Spacing. select Maximum Spacing. For Type of Parameter.

Unobstructed Ordinary. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. For Name. enter 130. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. Click OK. and press Enter.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. select Spaces. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Unobstructed Extra. 16 Using the same method. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. enter Sprinkler Schedule. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. under Available fields. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . NOTE The units of measure display automatically. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. based on the parameter settings you specified previously.

click Edit. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). select Minimum Sprinklers. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Area. click . For Type. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . and click OK. For Discipline. For Then by. In the Fields dialog. For Units. Enter the formula operator / after Area. and click Field Format. 22 Click OK twice. Select Header and Blank line. 19 Click the Formatting tab. select Common. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. under Other. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Sprinkler Zone. For Formula. For Rounding. select Number. select 0 decimal place. for Sort by. select Level. for Sorting/Grouping. select Fixed. and click View Properties. Click OK. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. enter Minimum Sprinklers. 20 On the Formatting tab. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area.

click Edit. and then select Hidden field. select Sprinkler Zone. and select Totals only. 26 Click OK 3 times. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. for Filter by. 27 In the drawing area. At the bottom of the dialog. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. select Minimum Sprinklers. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click the schedule. verify that Use default settings is selected.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. For Then by (second instance). select Hidden field. select Grand totals. select Number. select Level equals Level 2. 30 Click OK twice. For Fields. and then click Field Format. Under Field formatting. ■ In the Format dialog. for Filter. select Level. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. For Fields. and click View Properties.

On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. click Edit. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. for Available fields. and Count. and click View Properties. For Category. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. On the Formatting tab. select Grand totals. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Fields. and select Totals only. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. select Embedded Schedule. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. delete the word Maximum. select Calculate totals.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. Under Field formatting. select Count. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. double-click Type. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . select Sprinklers. System Name. for Embedded Schedule. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. under Other.

and the spacing parameter values are evident. 44 In the schedule. select space 221 Instruction. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. 41 In the plan view. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. select space 221 Instruction. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. Unobstructed. under Identity Data. 46 With the space still selected. and access the instance properties. 50 Access the instance properties. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. 52 Click OK. select Ordinary. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. under Identity Data. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. 48 In the floor plan. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. select Light. select Ordinary. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. for Protection Area Construction Type. 43 Click Cancel. Unobstructed. double-click FP . As a result.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. under Identity Data. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. but their values are not determined.Fire Protection Plan Design. for Protection Area Construction Type. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. Unobstructed. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog.

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. methodology. In the left pane of the Open dialog. go to http://www. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. you can choose to save your work.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. As you place the sprinklers. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. If the tutorial training files are not present. At the end of this tutorial. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. After finishing each exercise.rvt. However. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. 279 . You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans.autodesk. By following the recommended workflow. click Training Files. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. you will understand the process. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. and double-click Level 2 . The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. As you create the system. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.

This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. 3 In the Project Browser. After placing the initial sprinkler. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. When there is a small misalignment. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. When this happens. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building.

place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. select the sprinklers that you placed. and select Sprinkler . 11 In the drawing area.Pendent . 9 In space Instruction 202. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . and click to place 3 sprinklers. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. as shown. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers.Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. 10 Press Esc twice. while pressing Ctrl.

verify that Constrain is cleared.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. you place non-hosted sprinklers. Next. 13 On the Options Bar. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and then press Esc. as shown. Also. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left.

Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. you place non-hosted sprinklers. Because the sprinkler is not hosted.Fire Protection Plan . 18 Type WT. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . 200B.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. This number is determined in the schedule. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. Next. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. 17 In the Project Browser. 19 In the floor plan. and press Enter. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. for Offset. under Constraints. enter 10' 6".FP_Ceiling view. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. open Design ➤ FP . For Number.Design. you adjust the offset. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. 29 Press Esc. Notice that the schedule updates. enter 14' 6". and click Element Properties. enter 11. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. specify a vertical offset. and 200C). and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. move the cursor to the right. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". 25 Click OK.

This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. However. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. indicating that it’s the active view. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design is highlighted. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing.rvt. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP.30 Close the file with or without saving it. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. After creating the logical connection. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. In this exercise. click Training Files. and with piping (physical connection). Unlike logical connections (systems). you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. In the next exercise.Fire Protection Plan .

In the System Browser. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. as shown. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. and select Piping. click View ➤ Systems. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. Creating a Piping System | 285 . they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. As you assign sprinklers to systems.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. within the Piping Systems folder. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. 5 Right-click the header. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. named Fire Protection Wet. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder.

14 Click Finish Editing System. 11 With the system still selected. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. For Offset. and click Select. system equipment. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 19 Click OK. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. for System Name. 15 In the drawing area. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. providing system editing tools. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. Next. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. enter FP Wet_Zone2. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. For Pipe Type. and a piping layout preview displays. select Branch. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. In the left pane. 13 In the System Browser. verify that Main is selected. click Settings. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. press Tab. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. and select the system. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. indicating the logical connection. place the cursor over a sprinkler. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and on the Options Bar.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. and number of elements in the system. select an initial piping layout.Wet is selected. 12 On the Options Bar. The Edit Piping System panel displays. The Generate Layout tools are activated. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. verify that 9' 0" is specified. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system.

enter -12' 0". 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. select 2". (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. 23 For Offset. verify that Network is selected. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. click Solutions. and select solution 5. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. as shown. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. When the layout is finished. In general. and green represents branch lines). these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). click Place Base.20 On the Generate Layout panel. 22 On the Options Bar. 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. for Diameter.

as shown. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. On the Generate Layout panel. A (parallel movement control) displays. click Modify. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. 29 Click Finish Layout. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . and then you create piping to physically connect them. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . select a different layout solution. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. or that offset elevations are incorrect.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. the Connect Into tool. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. Next. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. Either relocate the system components. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. and various manual pipe creation tools. or manually modify the pipe. 32 If necessary.

Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select the elbow fitting as shown. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 If necessary.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 2 Zoom in. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i.rvt.Fire Protection Plan .

13 Click Finish Layout. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. 14 Close the System Browser. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. you can select the pipe or duct. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. or a system component to display system tools. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. and pipe or duct is created. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. 5 In the drawing area. radiators. verify that Network is selected.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. click Finish Editing System. and select solution 5. click Add To System. verify that Solutions is selected. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. air terminals. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. mechanical equipment. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). for Solution Type. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. 18 Click Finish Editing System. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 8 In the corridor. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. and so on) are logically connected by a system. 12 On the Options Bar. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. 9 On the Edit System panel.

Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. select 9'. and click Draw Pipe. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and then tile the views. 29 Using the same method. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.20 Open Design ➤ FP . 25 Select the sprinkler. right-click. and then press Esc. 21 In the Piping Plan. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. for Offset. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 27 On the Options Bar. 28 In the drawing area. 24 In the Piping Plan. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. 23 View the result in the 3D view. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added.

33 Close the file with or without saving it. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 .Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. 31 In the plan view. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. Because the whole system highlights. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system.

Design is highlighted.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 On the Options Bar.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . select 1/4" = 1'-0". for Scale. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area.rvt. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.Fire Protection Plan . You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. double-click on the section head to open the section view. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. ■ 6 Press Esc.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes.21 On the Options Bar. select 4". 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . for Diameter.

Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. 25 On the Options Bar. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 24 In the drawing area. as shown. select 1 1/4". 23 Close the 3D view. and then tag the piping as shown. The pipe diameter is modified. for Diameter. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . and maximize the floor plan. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). 26 Using the same method.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. You added tags to pipes. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. you created a wet fire protection system. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. In this exercise. In this tutorial. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. For additional practice. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. add annotations and dimensions. create details.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. 305 .

306 .

Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view.rvt. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. matchlines. 2 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. and click OK. 3 In the Rename View dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 307 . you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. If the view included detail graphics. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. right-click Level 1. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. and apply a view template. and view references. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. right-click Copy of Level 1. under Floor Plans. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. and click Rename. dependent views.Design ➤ Floor Plans. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. views and put them on the sheet. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. 10 In the drawing area. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. create dependent views for areas B and C. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. click Training Files. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. as shown. 9 Click OK. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Apply Default View Template. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. and click OK. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. and then press Esc. 4 Using the same method. and click Rename. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. more focused.rvt. 6 In the Project Browser.

click the current value. for Target view. select Double Dash 5/8". Click OK. For Line Weight. For Line Pattern. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. 21 Using the same method. Creating Dependent Views | 309 .12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. on the Options Bar. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . select 11. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. select black./ ---). 20 Select the upper view reference and. and then press Esc. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. 19 In the drawing area. and click OK. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 13 Press Esc twice. 14 Click Finish Matchline. In the Color dialog. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline.

drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. 25 Using the same method.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. as shown. and zoom to each of the view references. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 27 Using the same method. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . crop the dependent views for plans B and C. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201.

Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . 6 In the Project Browser. Click OK. and select the section box. 4 In the Project Browser. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. select Plumbing Isometric. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 2 Zoom in. For Sub-Discipline.29 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Properties. right-click Plumbing Isometric .rvt.Domestic Water. for View Name. click Training Files. For Default View Template. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. select Plumbing. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. right-click 3D Plumbing. enter Plumbing Isometric . Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. Under Graphics. and click to select it. and click Apply Default View Template. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Domestic Water. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. The section crop lines no longer display. select Documentation. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. for View Classification.

11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. For Pattern. press Tab 3 times. 12 Using the same method. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". and click to select it. select Dash. select 3. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. and then click OK. Click Apply.9 Right-click. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. The selected piping displays as a dashed line.

press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. 14 Right-click. and click to select it. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . as shown).13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view.

press Tab 3 times. 17 Label the fixtures as shown. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric .Sanitary Waste.Domestic Water view with detailing. and click to select it. click Reveal Hidden Elements. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. On the View Control Bar. On the View Control Bar. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. Right-click. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 18 Using methods learned previously. In the drawing area. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping.15 Press Esc. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.

and click to place the spot slope annotation. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. you use a plan view to create a callout view. For Slope. 21 Click OK twice. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. 25 Press Esc twice. verify that Common is selected. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. and then place the callout view on a sheet. When the view is associated with a sheet. In the Format dialog. 26 Close the file with or without saving it.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. as shown. click on the Format value. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. select To the nearest 1/8". 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. for Rounding. Creating Callout Views | 315 .

Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown.rvt. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. select 1/4"=1'-0''. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 5 On the Options Bar. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. for Scale.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. indicating that it’s the active view.

using the same method. for Line Weight. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. Click OK. ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. Creating Callout Views | 317 . and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. 13 In the Project Browser. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. select 5. under Sheets (all). double-click M601 . drag it to the sheet.

right-click the callout view.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. and click Apply Default View Template. 17 In the Project Browser. and select the viewport. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. Click OK. for View Name. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. For Default View Template. enter WSHP PART PLAN. For Title on Sheet. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .

Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Creating Callout Views | 319 . 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information.

26 In the Rename View dialog. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 29 Close the file with or without saving it. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click Apply View Template. and click OK. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. right-click the detail view. 25 In the Project Browser. enter Typical WSHP Detail. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. under Names. and click OK. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. and click Rename.

duct tags. symbols. linetypes.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. and annotation to create a legend. ■ work with model-based components. 321 . ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. you learn how to: ■ add text notes. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i.Creating Annotations In this exercise. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. as shown.rvt. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. click Training Files. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. 8 With the text still selected. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down.

verify that Leader is cleared. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. and then click Right Straight.9 Press Esc twice. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. 16 In the drawing area. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. a return diffuser. 15 On the Options Bar. as shown. and a segment of rectangular duct. select a supply diffuser. a segment of round duct. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Creating Annotations | 323 . Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box.

Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. and click Open. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. 21 In the Load Family dialog. under Category. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element.rfa. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and click OK. 22 In the Tags dialog. tag the remaining diffusers in the area.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. 24 On the Options Bar. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. for Ducts. click Load.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 20 In the Tags dialog. If necessary. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. clear Leader. 17 Click Modify.

select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. 26 On the Options Bar. and Attached End. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 31 On the Options Bar. Leader. Creating Annotations | 325 . select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. as shown. and then press Esc. select Horizontal. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical.25 In the drawing area. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. 32 In the drawing area. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP.

click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. 34 In the drawing area. select Free End. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . as shown.33 On the Options Bar. for Leader.

37 In the drawing area. you use temporary dimensions to locate. not simply an instance property. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. and all elements of that type are affected. and lock lighting fixtures.36 Press Esc twice. lay out. and click OK. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 40 Using the method learned previously. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. select the last tag placed. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. That’s because you changed a type property. for Leader Arrowhead. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. select Dot Open 1/16". Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Dimensions | 327 .

On the Options Bar. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. and then select the interior face of the wall. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. select the dimension line.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 12 Press Esc. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture.rvt.

18 Select the dimension value (7' . 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. Creating a Legend | 329 . and notes. linework. and offset them 8' from the wall. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. Because the dimensions are locked. 19 Using the same methods. Creating a Legend In this exercise. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. enter 8'. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room.3 1/2").13 Using the same method. and press Enter. 16 Press Esc. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. annotation symbols. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. click the 3 interior locks on the line.

8 Neck. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. click below the title to place the diffuser.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. click Training Files. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. select 1/4" = 1' -0". 10 Using the same method.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Click in the drawing area. enter Diffuser Legend. For Scale. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.rvt. For View. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. ■ 9 In the drawing area. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Click OK. select Floor Plan. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser .

11 Press Esc. 14 In the drawing area. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. Creating a Legend | 331 . 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. click next to the top diffuser.

DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. The selected detail lines are now thin. 21 Press Esc. and then press Esc.RISE symbol for the copy start point. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 24 Select the component’s break line. 27 While pressing Ctrl. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror.DROP and its text note. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 26 Press Esc.

double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet.30 Select Spot Elevation . in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 33 Click to the left of the left break line.MECHANICAL LEGEND. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. enter E. and then click Modify. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Modify. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. Creating a Legend | 333 . 34 Using the method learned previously. 35 Change the text on the right to N. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser.

40 Press Esc. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 41 Close the file with or without saving it.39 With the viewport still selected.

A detail callout that references another view. detail groups. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. 335 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. and text. A drafting view using detail components. indicating that it’s the active view. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram.rvt. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser .113 East elevation view. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. click Training Files. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram.Detailing 15 In this lesson. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. and click to place it. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . 8 Using the same method. clear Leader. 4 On the Options Bar. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing .113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. select each of the 2 panelboards. 5 In the drawing area. 7 Drag the Power Riser . Next. place Power Riser .113 East on the sheet. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. and then modify and align the views.

and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area.9 Press Esc. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . 12 Select the Level 1 line. under Identity Data. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. giving the appearance of a single view. 13 Right-click. and click Activate View. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. select the 113 North view. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. right-click. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click Deactivate View. and click OK. for Title on Sheet.

20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. right-click. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. In the next exercise. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. 19 Select the Level 1 line. and click Activate View. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. as shown. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. you add wiring to the diagram. select the 113 East elevation view. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing .Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 22 Press Esc. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click. 21 Using the drag control.

9 Beginning at the transformer. click New. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. and then click OK. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. for Name. expand Lines. as shown. notice that there are no snaps active. and click OK. Under Modify Subcategories. In the Line Styles dialog. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Close the Project Browser. for Line Weight. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. enter Electrical Power. select 6. As you draw. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). 8 On the Options Bar.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . click Training Files. verify that Chain is selected.113 North view.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. In the New Subcategory dialog.

add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3).10 Press Esc. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. for Offset. as shown. 11 Using the same method. 13 On the Options Bar. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. enter 1/8".

18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. TIP When you use the Trim tool. so that the result is as shown.

Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram.

26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. 29 Click Modify. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 28 Click above the cap. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. as shown. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 .

34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. select Multiple. 33 On the Options Bar. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints.31 While pressing Ctrl. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

40 Press Esc. 42 On the Options Bar. 39 Move the cursor to the right. and press Enter. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. and then press Esc. You enter exact values for each line length.36 Press Esc. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line.5. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . enter 0 0. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. enter 3/32". for Offset.

44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 50 With the group selected. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. you can ensure that they stay together. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. enter Ground. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing .125.25. select all 3 lines. and press Enter. for Name. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. Press Esc. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. click on the length dimension value. 46 In the Project Browser. Using the same method. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. 47 In the drawing area. and then press Esc. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. and click OK. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. while pressing Ctrl. enter 0 0.

Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . 52 Select the detail group. 54 Select the group. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. TP-2B. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move.51 Using the method learned previously. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard.

Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. In later exercises. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. click Training Files. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. for Name. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 59 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. and will place it on sheet E01. 4 Right-click the ViewCube. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Right-click the copy. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Zoom in to view the section.rvt. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. and click Rename. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and click OK. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. 3 In the Rename View dialog. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view.

6 Select the section box. 7 On the ViewCube. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. and then press Esc. click Home. and then click the corner where the Top. and Left sides converge. Back. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 .

9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. right-click. Click OK. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. Walkthroughs. select 3D Views. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Under Names. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. select 3D HVAC Iso. and click Apply View Template. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down.

16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. Typical. 19 Complete the text labels. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper).14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. and click to specify the second leader point. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. as shown. 15 Using the same method. Move the cursor down and to the left. (Right). and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

25 Click OK. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. select Crop Region Visible. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Click on the crop region. and under Extents. as shown. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser.To rotate and reposition a text label. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. and then click OK. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. under Extents. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area.

you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. click Training Files. For Scale. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . Place a detail component. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. right-click the view name. Use detail lines to create a detail group. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. 30 Close the file with or without saving it.29 In the drawing area. 3 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select the isometric view. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. and click Properties.rvt. select 3" = 1'-0". Click OK.

Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. select Plumbing. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 13 In the drawing area.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. click the point at the top of the drain. as the rectangle start point. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". for Sub-Discipline. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Click OK. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. 9 Zoom in to the component. select Documentation. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). For View Classification. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. 12 On the Element panel. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. as shown.

and then press Esc. 23 In the drawing area. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. Concrete. (Line). Drafting Detail Components | 355 . 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. 20 Select 1. 18 With the filled region still selected. select C. select the filled region.P. 21 In the drawing area. for Type.I. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. 22 Click Modify. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. and click OK.

29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. select Multiple. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 34 Press Esc. 31 On the Options Bar. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. and then click point 6 as the endpoint.28 Click Modify. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. and then click to select them.

and then select the side of the slab above the line. 45 Using the method learned previously. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. (Rectangle).38 Pan to the other end of the slab. 40 Click Finish Region. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. as shown. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. and then press Esc. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck.

as shown. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down.D. enter Flashing Membrane_F. and click OK. 52 In the Create Group dialog. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. press Tab to highlight the chain. 49 Click Modify. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. draw wide detail lines as shown. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. for Name. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.. select the Flashing Membrane group. and then click to select them. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 50 Highlight one of the wide lines.

58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. 61 Using the same method. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly.55 Press Esc. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. as shown. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge.

Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 64 Press Esc twice. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. 70 In the Keynotes dialog. as shown. select the keynote and drag the text to the right.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 67 On the Options Bar. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User.62 Press Esc twice. 72 If necessary. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. and then click OK. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Leader and Free End. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. and use the grips to resize the masking region. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. 71 Click Modify.

and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 81 Select the text note.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. and click to specify the text insertion point. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. and click to specify the second leader point. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 78 Move the cursor to the left. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 76 To select the leader start point. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 80 Press Esc twice.

84 Using the following image as a guide. as shown. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated.82 Continue annotating the detail.

and then press Esc twice. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. open P103 .Plumbing Part Plans & Details.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. 88 In the drawing area. select the view title. and click to place it. 90 Press Esc. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. select Black and White. Click Open.rvt. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. select Visible. For Import units. you import a CAD detail drawing. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . For Colors. Click OK. select Auto-Detect. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. For A-----NPP. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. select 3. for Line Weight. For Layers.dwg.

and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 11 Press Esc. and then press Esc. select the viewport title. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . 15 Close the file with or without saving it.8 Type ZF.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. open P103 . 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. 12 In the drawing area. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser.

366 .